VOYAGER
2021 Voyager
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition
_RUV_OM_EN_US
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents
can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 95
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 116
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 157
6 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................210
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 277
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................306
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................363
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ...................................................................................................... 371
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 376
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..............................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............8
Symbol Glossary.......................................................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 12
Key Fob .............................................................12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 16
IGNITION SWITCH ................................................. 16
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition .............................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ........................ 18
How To Use Remote Start................................18
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................19
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If
Equipped...........................................................19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................20
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................20
Remote Start Cancel Message........................20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 21
To Arm The System .........................................21
To Disarm The System .....................................21
Rearming Of The System .................................22
DOORS.....................................................................22
Manual Door Locks — If Equipped ..................22
Power Door Locks — If Equipped.....................23
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ..............24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped........................................................26
Manual Sliding Side Door ................................26
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped...........27
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................28
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................29
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................29
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............30
SEATS ....................................................................30
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................30
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................32
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................44
Heated Seats ...................................................46
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................46
Head Restraints ..............................................46
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................ 50
Introducing Voice Recognition ........................50
Basic Voice Commands ...................................50
Get Started .......................................................50
Additional Information .....................................51
MIRRORS................................................................ 51
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................51
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......52
Outside Mirrors ................................................52
Conversation Mirror .........................................52
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................52
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....................53
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 53
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................53
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............54
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................54
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener .....................................................54
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device......................................55
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button ...............................................................56
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........56
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 57
Multifunction Lever .........................................57
Headlight Switch...............................................57
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................58
High/Low Beam Switch....................................58
Flash-To-Pass....................................................58
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............58
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...............58
Lights-On Reminder..........................................59
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................59
Turn Signals......................................................59
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................59
Battery Protection ...........................................59
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 60
Interior Courtesy Lights ...................................60
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ............... 61
Windshield Wiper Operation .........................61
Rear Wiper And Washer...................................62
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 63
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................63
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................69
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .......................................................75
Climate Voice Commands................................76
Operating Tips .................................................76
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............77
Storage..............................................................77
Sun Screens — If Equipped..............................81
USB/AUX Control ...........................................82
Power Outlets ..................................................83
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped .............................85
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped .............85
WINDOWS...............................................................86
Power Windows ................................................86
Automatic Window Features ...........................87
Rest Auto Up.....................................................87
Wind Buffeting..................................................87
HOOD .....................................................................88
Opening.............................................................88
Closing ..............................................................88
LIFTGATE .................................................................89
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...........................89
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................89
Power Liftgate — If Equipped...........................90
Cargo Area Features ......................................91
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................91
Deploying The Crossbars .................................91
Stowing The Crossbars ....................................93
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 95
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................96
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................... 97
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................97
Oil Life Reset ...................................................98
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped .......................................................99
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 100
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 104
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................105
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................106
Red Warning Lights....................................... 106
Yellow Warning Lights................................... 109
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 113
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 113
White Indicator Lights................................... 114
Blue Indicator Lights..................................... 114
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......114
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................... 114
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ..............................115
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................116
Normal Starting ........................................... 116
AutoPark ........................................................ 117
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 120
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine..... 120
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 120
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button...................................... 120
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .........121
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........121
PARKING BRAKE .................................................122
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 122
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..............................125
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 126
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ........................................................... 126
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .......... 126
Gear Ranges .................................................. 127
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................130
POWER STEERING...............................................131
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 131
Autostop Mode .............................................. 131
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 132
To Start The Engine While In Auto
Stop/Start...................................................... 132
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 133
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ........................................................... 133
System Malfunction ...................................... 133
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 133
Cruise Control — If Equipped ........................ 133
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 135
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 136
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 136
ParkSense Display ........................................ 137
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 140
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System ........................................................... 140
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 140
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 141
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............. 142
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 143
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................. 144
Certification Label ......................................... 144
TRAILER TOWING ...............................................145
Common Towing Definitions......................... 145
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 147
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 148
Vehicle Loading Chart................................... 148
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 150
Towing Requirements .................................. 150
Towing Tips ................................................... 153
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................154
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................... 154
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................155
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 155
Driving Through Water ................................. 155
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................157
CYBERSECURITY .................................................157
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................158
Customer Programmable Features ............ 158
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................174
System Overview .......................................... 174
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ................................ 176
Safety And General Information .................. 176
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
UCONNECT MODES .............................................177
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................... 177
Radio Mode .................................................. 178
Media Mode .................................................. 188
Phone Mode ................................................. 191
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED ............................................................203
Android Auto™ .............................................. 203
Apple CarPlay®.............................................. 206
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay®
Tips And Tricks............................................... 208
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....209
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 209
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................210
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 210
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 211
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................217
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..................................................... 217
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation — If Equipped....................... 221
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ... 225
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................229
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 229
Important Safety Precautions....................... 229
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 230
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 240
Child Restraints ............................................ 256
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 273
Transporting Passengers.............................. 273
Transporting Pets ........................................ 273
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 274
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 275
Exhaust Gas ................................................. 276
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 277
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ..... 277
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 281
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 282
Jack And Spare Tire Location ....................... 282
Equipment Removal ..................................... 282
Jacking Instructions ..................................... 284
Road Tire Installation.................................... 288
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped....... 289
Return Inflatable Spare Tire ........................ 290
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .................... 290
JUMP STARTING.................................................. 297
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 297
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 298
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 299
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................... 300
MANUAL PARK RELEASE .................................. 301
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................302
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................303
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................305
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................305
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.....................................306
Maintenance Plan......................................... 307
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................310
3.6L Engine ................................................... 310
Checking Oil Level......................................... 311
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 311
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 312
Pressure Washing ......................................... 312
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................312
Engine Oil ...................................................... 313
Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 313
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 314
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 314
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 315
Body Lubrication .......................................... 317
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 318
Exhaust System ............................................ 321
Cooling System.............................................. 322
Brake System ............................................... 326
Automatic Transmission .............................. 327
FUSES ............................................................ 328
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................... 337
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
TIRES ....................................................................340
Tire Safety Information ................................. 340
Tires — General Information ........................ 348
Tire Types....................................................... 352
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 353
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 355
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 356
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 358
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................358
Treadwear...................................................... 358
Traction Grades............................................. 359
Temperature Grades..................................... 359
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................359
BODYWORK..........................................................360
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 360
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 360
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 360
INTERIORS ...........................................................361
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 361
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 362
Leather Surfaces........................................... 362
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 362
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................. 363
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 363
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 363
Torque Specifications ................................... 364
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 364
3.6L Engine ................................................. 364
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 365
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 365
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fue
l Vehicles........................................................ 365
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 365
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 366
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 366
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 366
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................. 367
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 368
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 370
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................371
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 371
Prepare A List ................................................ 371
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 371
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................371
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 372
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 372
Mexico............................................................ 372
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 372
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 372
Service Contract ........................................... 372
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................373
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................373
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................373
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 373
In Canada ...................................................... 374
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................374
General Information............................................375
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar®
parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 106.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 106
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 107
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 106
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 107
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 108
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 108
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 108
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 108
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 108
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 109
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 109
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 109
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 109
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 109
Red Warning Lights
1
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 109
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 110
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 110
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 110
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 110
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 110
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 110
Service Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 111
Yellow Indicator Lights
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 113
Yellow Warning Lights
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
11
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 113
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 113
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 114
Set Speed Display
Ú page 114
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 114
1
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 11
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system. The key fob also contains
an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of
the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove
compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
A low key fob battery condition may be indi-
cated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates
from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed
for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may
not be visible in direct sunlight Ú page 375.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s front door and
sliding door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate. Push and
release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
Settings in the Uconnect system can change to
lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will
unlock again only if the key fob is inside the
passenger compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button within the
Uconnect system Ú page 158.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals.
Dispose old batteries by placing them in
correct containers according to the law or by
taking them to a dealership, where they will
be handled appropriately.
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — PANIC Alarm
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of
the key fob with your thumb and then
pulling the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat blade screw driver into
the now exposed slot and carefully pry on
both sides to disengage the snaps.
Gently remove the back cover from the fob,
being careful not to damage any of the
snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery
rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts
up. Remove the depleted battery from the
battery pocket and dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly
seated in place and secured under both
tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position
and snap it back in place by pushing it
against the fob until it is seated all around.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell
battery is swallowed, it can cause severe
internal burns in just two hours and can
lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does
not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings that can be
applied to determine the driving experience for
other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings
are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the
vehicle owner creates when accessing the
specific settings for the first time.
KeySense also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use
that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While
this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will
respond accordingly to the customized vehicle
settings and mandatory features. This includes
enhanced driving assistance features,
increased driver alerts, and the locking of
certain optional features. Settings can be
customized within the Uconnect system
Ú page 158.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be
functioning in KeySense mode when the
KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored
messages are cycled, then start-up
KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed)
are displayed
The following features are always enabled when
this key is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if front row occu-
pied seat belts are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to
15 out of 39
Daytime Running Lights
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on
for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 375.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled
and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The
fourth position is START. During START, RUN will
illuminate.
START/STOP Ignition Button
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices
(e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still
available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
Ú page 116.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the customer
enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 375.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operations are
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
Brake switch inactive
(brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, either push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort
Systems — If Equipped” in the next section for
detailed operation.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will also turn on if
programmed in the comfort menu screen within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 158. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the Remote Start is
activated, if programmed via the comfort menu
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate
control settings depending on the outside
ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent
upon the outside ambient temperature. When
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position,
the climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, and Recirculation
on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 63.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings
will change, and exit automatic operation, if
manually adjusted by the driver while the
vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
the OFF button on the climate controls, which
will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to Remote
Start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks, power sliding doors and
power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
system provides both audible and visible
signals. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure
the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 24.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle
(if equipped) Ú page 24.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry, push the
keyless ignition START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob
in the vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity system. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5
seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the
trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until
the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock Location
Manual Door Lock Knob
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and
any front door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking your keys in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the door
will allow the locks to operate. A chime will
sound if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position and a door is open, as a reminder to
place the ignition in the OFF position and
remove the key fob.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 158.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
passive entry handle from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect
Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will
initiate illuminated approach (low beams,
license plate lamp, position lamps) for the
time 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the
turn lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
system (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from
the outside using the Passive Entry system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the
vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will
unlock the driver’s side doors (driver/sliding
door) automatically. Grabbing the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will rotate when the door is
unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 158.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a key fob inside the car,
and it does not find any key fob outside the car,
then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected
outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any
of the following conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and
pull the liftgate open.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to
lock all four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button, or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 375.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door
is opened. This will occur only after the gear
selector has been placed into the PARK
position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
gear selector has been placed out of PARK and
all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
will not operate if there is any manual operation
of the door locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system Ú page 158.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside
or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior
handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door
inside handle functions by rocking forward and
back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the
door and rocking forward releases the hold
open latch in order to close the door.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe
the following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop
when opening the door. This is very important
when your vehicle is parked on an incline as
the door will slide faster in the downhill direc-
tion.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated
when the sliding door is fully opened. This
latch will keep your sliding door open on any
incline. To close the sliding door after the
hold-open latch is activated, you must rock
the inside handle forward or pull outward on
the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully
latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open.
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the door when the door is locked. All
other ways require the sliding door to be
unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pressing the button on the
outside handle will unlock and open the sliding
door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
There are power sliding side door switches
located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of
the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of
the power sliding doors from the rear seats,
push the power sliding door power off button,
located in the overhead console, to remove
power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the
overhead console, will be lit when the handles
are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the
power sliding door power off button will return
the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side
door while it is closing or opening, the door
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position and an audible tone will sound,
provided it meets sufficient resistance.
The turn signals will flash with sliding door
movements.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle
due to obstacles, it will power open on the
next command.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the sliding
doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door
Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the
Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child
Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the
Child Protection Door Lock is in the locked
position.
After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the
Child Protection Door Lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur
if caught in the path of the sliding door.
Make sure the door path is clear before
closing the door.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a sliding door or door open
message or warning indicator. Failure to do
this could result in unintentionally leaving
the sliding door open while driving.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
The inside door handle will not open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door
Lock is engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door,
regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock
lever position.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the
Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the
overhead console. When the overhead
console power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door
may not be power opened or closed by
pushing the buttons just inside the sliding
doors or pulling on the handles.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to
disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside
door handle with the sliding door closed to
make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is
in the desired position. The inside door handle
will open the sliding door when the Child Protec-
tion Door Lock is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the sliding doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes or more before
automatically shutting off. This time may vary
depending on the temperature of the
environment. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 20.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
system of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever
upward to raise the seat height or pump the
lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and
push back to the desired position and release
the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using
body pressure, lean forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward
or rearward. The manual seat adjustment
handle is located under the seat cushion at the
front edge of each seat.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
and push back to the desired position and
release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever
to return the seatback to its normal position.
Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate
two passengers, while providing easy access to
the third row seats without any folding of the
second row seats.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly,
lift the recline lever located on the outboard
side of the seat cushion, and push back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback
to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the
seatback has latched.
Recline Lever
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is
removable for added cargo space.
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats
forward to allow room for the bench seat
removal.
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the
recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Folded Position
3. Pull the release strap located behind the
seat, in the center near the floor to release
the latches.
Release Strap Location
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire
seat toward the front of the vehicle. The
seat can now be removed through either
sliding side door, or through the liftgate.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
NOTE:
Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is
recommended that two people are utilized
for its removal.
When storing the removed bench seat, it is
important to keep the seatback in the folded
position.
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats
front attachments into the detent positions
on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into
its original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are
in the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the
seatback to the seating position.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If
Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it
is foldable and removable for added cargo
space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the
release strap to release the rear latches. The
seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from
the detent positions in the floor.
Release Strap
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE:
Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the
detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward
to lock the seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat posi-
tion. Use the recline lever to unlock the seat-
back.
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when
returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original
position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat
Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for
easy entry into the third row with or without a
child seat installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row
seat is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go
seats) that provides easier access to the
third row by tilting the seat forward.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull
the handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to
access the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position,
just pull back on the seatback and lock the
seat into position.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more
accessibility for passengers to enter and exit
the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold
the seat by pulling the recliner handle on
the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling
the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests
are folded up.
Recliner Lever
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death may occur.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the
folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position. Then, pull the seatback toward the
back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go
Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go,
third row passengers can pull the strap and
push the seat forward to fold the seatback
down and tilt the seat to the floor for an easy
exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat
is installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with
the Stow ‘n Go feature, are removable for added
cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure
it is in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of
the seat, near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward
position.
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed
from the vehicle. Grab the front seatback
edge located near the head restraint and
the grab the bar on the rear side of the seat
cushion for easy removal.
Seat Removal
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted
forward, align the seat’s front attachments
into the detent positions on the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into
its original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are
in the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat
back to the seating position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to
the seatback by pushing the button on the
guide and pushing the head restraint
down.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble
the seat rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat
out of the storage bin and push the seat
forward until the anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright
position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating,
the second and third row seats can be folded
into the floor for convenient storage.
Second Row Stow 'n Go
To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat
all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seatback all the way
forward using the recliner handle located on the
outboard side of the cushion. Move the seat
height to at least mid position using the height
adjuster handle in the outboard side of the
cushion.
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
For information on storage bin function
with the seats rearward Ú page 79.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat
by grabbing the strap on the lower part of
the seatback, and guide the seat into the
storage area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat
into the storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel
backwards by the bottom corner edge of the
panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unstow Second Row Seats
To unstow the seat from the floor, move the
front seat all the way forward using the manual
seat adjustment bar.
1. To access the storage area, remove the
floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock
rod in the locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward
the front seats while folding the top half
down and rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and
flat to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clear-
ance to the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the stowed position with the seatback
upright otherwise damage to the seat may
occur.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull
the seat out of the storage area. Push the
seat rearward making sure that it locks into
the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE:
The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be
necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock
the back before folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the
storage area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its
original state, grab the bottom corner and
extend it outward.
Extend Panel
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until
it clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the head restraints are in their upright
positions when the seat is to be occupied.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an
eight-way power seat for the driver. The power
seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seat. The switches control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
in two directions. Pull upward or push
downward on the front of the seat switch, the
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a
four-way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the
equipped power seat. Push the switch forward
or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support. Push the switch upward or downward
to raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped
with a two-way lumbar adjustment. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of
the equipped power seat. Push the switch
forward or rearward to increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition is cycled out of the
OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop if the driver seat position is between
0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition is
cycled out of the OFF position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled through the programmable
features in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 97.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 20.
ADJUSTABLE ARMREST (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable
armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be
adjusted up or down.
To adjust the armrest height, push and hold the
button while moving the armrest to the desired
position. Release the button to lock the armrest
into place.
Adjustable Armrest
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
The front head restraints are also adjustable
forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle to the desired position.
To adjust the head restraint rearward, continue
pulling forward on the top of the head restraint
to the furthest forward position and the head
restraint will return to the upright position.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as
well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if
equipped), may have adjustable head
restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable and non-remov-
able. Do not pull on non-adjustable head
restraints when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 229.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility.
Pull the release strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in
the third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment Ú page 229.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as
far as it can go. Then, push the release button
and the adjustment button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
using the adjustment button, adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 375.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the
driver to adjust up, down and left, right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle).
The mirror should be adjusted while set in the
day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
right of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE. If your vehicle is equipped with an
on/off button on the mirror, the mirror will
default to on and can be turned on/off through
the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Button
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — IF
E
QUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a
conversation mirror to view all the passengers
in the vehicle. Push the panel to release the
drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to
latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much on
side convex mirrors could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance
of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Right Mirror Select
3 — Mirror Control Switch
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the
L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you
want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be
adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button Ú page 375.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
If you require assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink ®indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning the
programming process.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some US gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two
seconds until HomeLink® has successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column. The multifunction
lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/
low beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and the
fog lights.
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking
light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second
detent for headlight, parking light and
instrument panel operation.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle
will illuminate when the engine is started. This
provides a constant lights on condition until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running
Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 158.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights
on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, turn the headlight switch to the
extreme clockwise position aligning the
indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch.
When the system is on, the Headlight Time
Delay feature is also on. This means your
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To turn the Automatic System off, turn the
headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off)
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting
your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. The 90 second delay interval begins when
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights
or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition is placed in the ON position, the delay
will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose
to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or
90 seconds or not remain on. You can change
the timer setting through the Uconnect system
Ú page 158.
If the headlights are turned off before the
ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion to activate this feature.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the vehicle will chime when the driver's door is
opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch control knob. Pushing
the headlight switch control knob a second time
will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the
turn signals on, a chime will sound and a
message will display in the cluster to alert the
driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
BATTERY PROTECTION
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position.
After eight minutes of the ignition being in the
OFF position and the headlight switch in any
position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will
turn off automatically until the next cycle of the
ignition or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than
OFF during the eight minute delay.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent
the battery from discharging once the doors
are closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be
turned off approximately 10 minutes after
the ignition is in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are
courtesy/reading lights. The lights turn on when
a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading
lights. Push the lens to turn these lights on while
inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time
to turn each light off.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
door handle lights, under instrument panel
lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin
lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the dimmer control on the right to the off
position (extreme bottom). The interior lights
will remain off when the doors or liftgate are
open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
the headlight switch, and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate
the instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel. At the top
detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the
interior lights will also illuminate.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
At the bottom most setting (extreme bottom)
interior lights are turned off (dome off), and the
cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their
lowest dimmable setting.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness
Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature
brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, instrument cluster display, and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
Washer And Wiper Controls
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a
switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch
at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of
the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
To turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the
switch within the lever all the way down to OFF.
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the windshield
wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable.
Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever
to the first detent position, and then turn the
switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay
settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe
interval from a minimum of one cycle every
second to a maximum of approximately
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward
toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while
on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several cycles,
then turn off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 318.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upwards to operate one of two modes for the
rear window wiper:
First detent — intermittent mode.
Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
CLIMATE CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost mode, the
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system
shall remain active to prevent fogging of the
windows.
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of
fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost
Mode must be manually selected to clear the
windshield and side glass.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust
blower speed if needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation
button on the touchscreen, or push
the button on the faceplate to change
the system between recirculation
mode and outside air. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when
the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode if not recommended.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and
press the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower speed and
air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO
on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen
Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 75.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
the button on the faceplate to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this
feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and
side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. Performing this function will cause
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to
switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return
to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
the button on the faceplate to turn on
the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5
radio, the temperature can be adjusted by
pressing the Temperature readout on the top
left and right corners of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature settings. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of
the knob to change the airflow distribution
mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of
the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to turn the Climate
Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls.
The control functions now operate the rear
system.
Press the "Front Climate" button on the
touchscreen to return to the front climate
controls.
Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release the Rear Climate
button to access the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are on.
Rear Auto Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on.
This feature automatically controls the rear
interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow
distribution and amount. Toggling this function
will cause the rear system to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes.
Ú page 75.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings.
NOTE:
The Rear Lock button is only available on the
touchscreen.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to
change the display on the Uconnect
system back to the Front Climate
Controls.
Rear Temperature Control
These buttons provide the front occupants with
the ability to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature will move up and
down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature/mode/
blower settings while in SYNC will automatically
exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to
switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons
on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air
comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The
system provides heated air through the floor
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature
Lock button is turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner,
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature
and the rear modes to suit your comfort
needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
AUTO Button
The AUTO button automatically
controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution
and amount of airflow. Performing
this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes
Ú page 75.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control up button to raise the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control down button to lower the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be
manually set to off, or any fixed
blower speed by pushing the blower
control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger
of the two icons increases blower speed,
whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases
the blower speed.
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
on. Performing this function again will
cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will
turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to
change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
(Air Conditioning) can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink, and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. Performing this
function will cause the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the
Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature. Pressing SYNC on the touchscreen
while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes
the driver and passenger temperatures only. In
order to SYNC rear temperature to driver
temperature, the touchscreen must be on the
Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower
control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on
the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as
you turn the blower control knob clockwise
from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large
blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower speed can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the
icons.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of
the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to change control to rear control
mode; rear display appears. Control func-
tions now operate rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" button on
the touchscreen.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to
access the rear climate controls. The
indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are on.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release this button to lock
out the rear manual temperature
controls from adjusting the rear
temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to
change the display on the Uconnect
system back to the Front Climate
Controls.
Rear Temperature Control
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the
passenger’s temperature moves up and down
with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front
and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to
switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air
comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from the headliner outlets and
floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen
to change the air distribution mode to
Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes
from the floor outlets.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system has floor air outlets at the rear right side
of the third row seats and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position.
The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through
the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons
are located on the headliner on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control up button to raise the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature
control down button to lower the
temperature. The rear temperature
settings are displayed in control head.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be
manually set to off, or any fixed
blower speed by pushing the blower
control buttons. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger
of the two icons increases blower speed,
whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases
the blower speed.
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control system through an
intake grille, located in the floor under the
passengers’ seats. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower
motor.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can
be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the
outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner
outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect system Ú page 158.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display
will be turned off when the system is being used
in the manual mode.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended
Ú page 368.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used Ú page 368. Use of the air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 359.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C
(Air Conditioning) for long periods, as fogging
may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Release Handle
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode) ,
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to (Panel Mode) .
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode) .
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn (A/C) on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode) . If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode) .
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the intention to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open
position.
Full Open Position
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
The drawer is actuator assisted once the access
button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the
fully open position.
Drawer Access Button
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the
bottle holder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while
driving. If left open during a collision,
additional damage may occur to property or
the drawer mechanism.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on
some models.
Front Seatback Storage
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently
molded into the front door entry scuff moldings.
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped)
located in the areas below the load floor,
located in front of the second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats
in the rearward position, place the lock rod
in the unlocked position so the load floor
can fold upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
2. Pull the latch located near the second row
seat to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able
to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, chil-
dren can die from suffocation or heat
stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if
the seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie
down.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin
Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built
into the latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for
the second and third row seating positions. The
coat hook load limit is 10 lb (4.5 kg). Exceeding
the recommended load limit can cause the coat
hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle.
Coat Hook
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill
trim panels, and the tops of the windows are
equipped with hooks that the sun screens
attach to when pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with
the front seat tracks, which have minimal
clearance to the cover. If the storage bin
cover is left in the open position, front seat
adjustment may damage the cover.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen
over the two hooks attached to the top of the
window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab
upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the
screen back into the base sill.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located
throughout the vehicle that allow an external
USB device to be plugged into the USB port.
There are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs
(Type C) and two Standard USBs (Type A). There
is also an AUX port located between the USB
ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped Ú page 203.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in
this vehicle.
In the floor tray
On the back of the front row seats
(if equipped).
Above the rear cup holder in the third row
seats (if equipped).
USB Charging Port In The Floor Tray
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from ignition only to
constant battery powered all the time. See an
authorized dealer for details.
Rear Seat USB Charging Port
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge
battery operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller
and larger USB ports, and when a phone device
is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB ports,
that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets can be
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol
to indicate how the outlet is powered.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered
when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position,
while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are
connected directly to the battery and powered
at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located at the bottom
of the instrument panel.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlets, there is
also a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — F95A-F95B USB IP 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho-
rized dealer through Mopar® parts.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
returns to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
SMOKER'S PACKAGE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
With the optional authorized dealer-installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash
receiver is inserted into one of the two
cupholders in the center floor console. To install
the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb
grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure.
Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for
cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim
panel control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows
by pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
Power Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position, depending upon the
accessory delay setting. Opening a front door
will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front
passenger’s door trim panel which operates the
passenger door window and a set of controls
that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position and during power accessory
delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close
the sliding door window by a single control on
the door handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has
activated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
REST AUTO UP
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the control up for an additional two
seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window
completely and continue to hold the control
down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize
the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
OPENING
The hood release lever (to open the primary
latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary
latch) must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the
vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward
the passenger side of the vehicle. The
safety latch is located behind the center
front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking
tab and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper
arms are not in motion and not in the lifted
position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmis-
sion must be in PARK.
CLOSING
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with
the other hand remove the support rod
from its seat and reinsert it into the locking
tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is
completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button
will release the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will
unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE:
When you push the Passive Entry button, either
only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and
the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 158.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle to lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
Button just inside the liftgate on the upper
left trim (when liftgate is open)
Using the above ways to open or close the
liftgate:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
The key fob and the overhead console button
will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate
to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, pressing the touch pad on the
outside handle will unlock and open the liftgate,
with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts
can be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings
Ú page 158.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped),
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate
opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed
position, there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft
(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit
on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The
front seats must be moved slightly forward of
the rearmost position.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to
carry weight on vehicles equipped with a
luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lb
(68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed
over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered
stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars
should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
Roof Rack
The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase
the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle.
Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends of the
crossbar and lift the crossbar from its
stowed position in the side rail. Repeat
with crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting
joint. Slide the thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof
making sure the letters on the crossbars
align with the matching letters on the side
rail.
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both
thumb screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be
deployed in two different positions.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely
loosen the thumb screws at both ends. Lift
the crossbar away from the matching letter
to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the
correct side rail. Make sure the letters on
the crossbar align with the matching letters
on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side
rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the cross-
bars in the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satel-
lite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
experience interruption of satellite radio
reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars deployed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or
loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 97.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops
back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats Ú page 322.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
position (and the key removed, for vehicles with
mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped
with an instrument cluster display (base or
premium cluster), which offers useful
information to the driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display controls allows
the driver to select information by pushing the
directional buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the Main Menu items.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the Main Menu
items.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display (base/premium
cluster) features a driver interactive display that
is located in the center of the instrument
cluster, and may include the following menu/
submenu items:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip (Trip A / Trip B)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate it is time to change the
engine oil. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance,
refer to the following procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Reset-
ting oil life other than when associated with a
scheduled maintenance may result in damage
due to not properly maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down arrow button
to access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the left arrow button or right
arrow button to access the “Oil Life”
submenu.
5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
6. Push the up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display menu screen.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
KEYSENSE CLUSTER MESSAGES — IF
E
QUIPPED
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
With KeySense in use there will be multiple
associated messages shown in the following
table:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
“Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the driver interactive display
menu options until the desired menu is reached
Ú page 97.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speedometer is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to toggle between
MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the left or
right arrow button to scroll through the
following information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON,
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset Ú page 225.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a
percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK
button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will
be displayed at all times, but the following
conditions will need to be met in order to reset
Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button
will reset the gauge and the numeric display will
return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine
operation.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
The Fuel Economy Menu will display the
following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled
between using the left and right arrow
buttons; one with Current Value displayed
and one without the Current Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km,
or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond
to the particular engine requirements
Hold OK to reset average fuel economy infor-
mation.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the Trip
A and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will
display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Messages is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows
the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the right arrow button will allow you
to see what the stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be
met. Messages remain in the stored stack until
condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
3 — Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title
Menu Title
Digital Speed
4 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the OK button to enter Speed Warning. Use the
up or down arrow button to turn the Speed
Warning ON or OFF, then push and release the
OK button to confirm the selection. If the ON
status is selected, use the up or down
arrow button to set the desired speed, then
push the OK button to set the speed for the
Speed Warning. A Speed Warning telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a
number matching the set speed, with a pop-up
message to inform the driver that the Speed
Warning has been set to the desired speed.
Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound and a pop-up warning
message will display. If the set speed is
exceeded more than 2 mph (3 km/h), a
continuous chime will sound for up to
10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer
exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster
will also change from white to yellow, and a
pop-up warning message will pop-up on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense
is in use.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions
are deteriorating, electrical load reduction
actions will take place to extend the driving time
and distance of the vehicle. This is done by
reducing power to or turning off non-essential
12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be
functional when the vehicle propulsion system
is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on
the High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge
(SOC) or temperature. It will display a message
if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point
where the vehicle may stall due to lack of
electrical supply, or will not restart after the
current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the
message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 107.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the
right and left arrow buttons.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For each trip the following information will be
displayed:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the
last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset. Elapsed time will incre-
ment when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the OK button to reset the
currently displayed trip.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
a door is ajar/open and not fully
closed. This indicator will reflect
which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 131.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service Ú page 300.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 229.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast
rate for approximately 15 seconds
when the vehicle security system is
arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running.
If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this
warning light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
If the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the AEB Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer
for service Ú page 221.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service Ú page 131.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 133.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated
when a KeySense key is detected
upon startup of the vehicle. The
indicator will remain lit for the entire
key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key
is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the
vehicle will respond to settings associated with
the KeySense profile Ú page 12.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode Ú page 131.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Continued)
(Continued)
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 133.
Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 157.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
WARNING! (Continued)
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions; OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition positions without starting the vehicle
and to use the accessories follow these steps:
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC position
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
position (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time.
If pressure is detected on both pedals simulta-
neously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 97.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the situations
below occur. It is a back up system and should
not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and on the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver
attempts to turn off the engine, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The gear
selector will automatically reset itself to the
PARK position. The vehicle’s ignition will then
move to the OFF position (engine off). When
AutoPark is activated the instrument cluster will
display the message “AutoPark Engaged”.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s
transmission to the PARK position. The Electric
Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions Ú page 124.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal
is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
(Continued)
(Continued)
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch momentarily.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will display in the instrument cluster
display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink
continuously until the gear selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
T
O TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING
ENGINE START/STOP B
UTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition switch position will remain in the
ACC position until the gear selector is in
PARK and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK,
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) and the above conditions are met,
enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the
NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 297.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the instrument cluster will display a
“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition will switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the passenger’s side
headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly
use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the
cord to the hook-and-loop strap and
properly stow away behind the passenger’s
side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized dealer.
The engine block heater will require
110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the
heater element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 312.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient
and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the parking brake
switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features Ú page 158.
The EPB is located in the integrated center
stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF, however,
it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The
light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
Once the parking brake is engaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled
and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle
away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake switch momentarily. You may hear a
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake disengages. You may also notice
a small amount of movement in the brake
pedal.
Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, push on the EPB switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The
BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and a
continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically
while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE
warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent
service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle
stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be
programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the
automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto
Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
customer selection through the customer
programmable features Ú page 158.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not
in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and
there is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal, the parking brake will
automatically engage to prevent the vehicle
from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB while the driver door is open
and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position and back to
ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only
be done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the brake service in your
vehicle Ú page 158. This menu based system
will guide you through the steps necessary to
retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear
brake service.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause
serious damage to the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake Service Mode has requirements that
must be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless
the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear selector has
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW
shift positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear
based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear
range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate
it, to access the L position. You must also press
the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at
low speeds).
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy.
By design, some vehicle and driveline
combinations utilize NINTH gear only in very
specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” will
illuminate, a warning message will appear in the
instrument cluster, and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 130. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
If Recreational Towing Ú page 154.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 303.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased
engine braking. To access the LOW position,
push down on the gear selector and rotate it
fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system
relies on four microphones embedded in the
headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine
noise, and assists an onboard frequency
generator, which creates counteracting sound
waves in the audio system’s speakers. This
helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during
drive.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once
driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the
vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off Ú page 106.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING"
OR "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance Ú page 106.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or
shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically
re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section Ú page 106.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions for
Stop/Start and ensure they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the
Stop/Start system may be viewed in the
instrument cluster display Stop/Start screen.
In the following situations the engine will
not stop:
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the
Stop/Start OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTO
S
TOP/START
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this
time a message will display "Stop/Start Not
Ready Battery Charging".
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled
Ú page 106.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push
the Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Stop/Start telltale will remain
yellow Ú page 97.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system for cruising at a constant preset
speed.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped
with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle
brakes may be automatically applied and
released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic
braking function by pressing the gas pedal,
turning ParkSense off via ParkSense switch,
or changing the gear while the automatic
brakes are being applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is not available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may not
provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid
colliding with a detected obstacle depending
on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake
capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles
that approach the rear of the vehicle from the
left and/or right sides.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for controlling the vehicle's
movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations/precautions, see
Ú page 141.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect system Ú page 158.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 97. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an
obstacle has been detected, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status,
and remain on until the vehicle is moved out of
REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the Park-
Sense system will reject customer input to turn
the system off via the hard switch. The instru-
ment cluster display will show a "KeySense in
Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled"
message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display Ú page 97 will show
the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds
while the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”.
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
“PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
blockage or sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with
a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 158.
ParkView Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
A touchscreen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the
camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can
be disabled via a touchscreen button
personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler
door (3 o'clock position) and release to
open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper
doors while refueling.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain
from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the
fuel filler door and then release. The fuel
filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs,
lightly push on the fuel filler door around the
perimeter to break the ice build-up.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR.
Total load must be limited so GVWR and front
and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 144.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 144.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. TSC and a Weight Distributing (load
equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier
TW and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the weight
referenced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight
the vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your
vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle full fluids NO occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight
of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6005 lb (2723 kg)
CURB = 4500 lb (2041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lb
(2723 kg) - 4500 lb (2041 kg) = 1505 lb
(682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg)
(4 x 150 lb [68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of
3600 lb [1632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of
cargo in vehicle
Engine/Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR (Gross
Combined Weight
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Weight)
Max. Tongue Weight
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on sticker in driver’s side door jamb.
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants
Max Cargo No
Trailer
Tongue Load, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With
Max Trailer 360 lb
(136 kg) Tongue
Load
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg)
1205 lbs (546 kg)
1205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
845 lb (383 kg)
845 lbs (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg)
955 lbs (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) –
360 lb (136 kg) =
545 lb (247 kg)
545 lbs (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lb (476 kg)
455 lbs (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
95 lb (43 kg)
95 lbs (43 kg)
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle
Ú page 345.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 306 When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 348.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
increased engine braking on steep downhill
grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
(EPB) engagement, you must ensure that the
Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before
towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the
ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features Ú page 158.
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of
commercial towing service, for further infor-
mation Ú page 303.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build-up
between the tire and road surface. This is
hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider
the following Warnings and Cautions before
doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
157
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4
With 7-inch Display system, refer to
Ú page 174.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or Ú page 114.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected
at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting option until a check mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected
by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle
owner creates when accessing the specific
settings for the first time. This four-digit PIN can
only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the
touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or
off. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a
collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide
an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is
detected.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the
Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime”
setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible
chime.
Maximum Vehicle Speed
This setting will adjust the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be
set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by
using the “-” and “+’ options.
Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off.
Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off.
Setting Name Description
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help”
setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of
what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List
off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or
off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines
This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or
off.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking
This setting will need to be selected to access certain safety features
listed below:
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped — This setting will
change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an
object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near”
setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an
object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped — This setting will turn the
Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deac-
tivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — This setting will turn the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking system on or off.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s brake system.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The
available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds
12 mph (20 km/h). The “Auto Door Locks” feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see
an authorized dealer for service.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising
or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or
senses an obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats (if
equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The available options are “On” and
“Off”.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only
activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Restore Settings To Default
When the Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system
back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 177.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 191.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Ú page 158.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds
to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen
from freezing or being stuck.
Feature Description
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 63.
Feature Description
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 375.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to tune the radio to the
next available station or channel. During a Seek
Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the
starting station after passing through the entire
band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Bar
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the
Seek Up or Seek Down button to advance
the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example below:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen any time during the Replay
Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button
again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Tracks
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 178.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
When in the Tracks List screen you can rotate
the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track
name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to
start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other
device(s) have previously been paired. If
the system has a phone previously
paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up
will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the
Add Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Ucon-
nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button or the Settings
Gear button next to the selected number to
display the option’s pop-up. In the pop-up,
select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you
want to remove from your favorites. This will
bring up the options for that Favorite
contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri
help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system Ú page 375.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with speech technology, the
steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons
on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To
use Android Auto™, perform the following
procedure:
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately
once a compatible device is connected. You can
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel
until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access,
stream, and play your favorite music
with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio
playable application. Using your smartphone’s
data plan, you can stream endless music on the
road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push
and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android
Auto™.
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/
to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™
VR, which recognizes natural voice commands,
to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately.
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes® or any third party
application installed on your device.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible
apps that are available to use, every time it is
launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device
is unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console
USB ports.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily improve from repositioning the
mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 375.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS).These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at
the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active, is
the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of
the braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, striking objects or other
vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting
the above conditions. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
(Continued)
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF button to enter partial mode “Partial Off”
mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section) has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, the ESC system will be on even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N).
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
Ú page 158.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a
trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations Ú page 145.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind
spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in false detections. The BSM
warning light may even remain illuminated
the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear
Ú page 158.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror warning indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
The BSM system can become blocked if snow,
ice, mud, or other road contaminations
accumulate on the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located. The system may
also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as
a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If
blockage is detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily
Unavailable, Wipe Rear Corners” message will
display in the cluster, both mirror lights will
illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not
occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function
when the condition clears. To minimize system
blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume Ú page 221.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes, etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 375.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver. Additionally, if your vehicle is obscured
by a flat object on one side the system can false
alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with
the KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped) Ú page 99.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking
and the system determines that the driver
intends to avoid the collision by braking but has
not applied sufficient brake force, the system
will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a
speed below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes. If a pedestrian is
encountered in the path at the same speed
threshold, the system will also attempt to bring
the vehicle to a stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 375.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle
is restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the
KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped) Ú page 99.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 158.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than the “Medium” setting.
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Equipped
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a
subsystem of the FCW system that provides the
driver with audible and visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display, and may apply
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a
pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. When the system determines a collision
with the pedestrian in front of you is no longer
probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows
the system to warn you of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect
display in the Controls settings Ú page 158.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or active braking will
be available in case of a possible frontal
collision with the pedestrian.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can PEB detect every type of potential
collision with a pedestrian. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could
lead to serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down.
The system will reset to the default setting when
the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message. When this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 348 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú page 375.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a
Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the “Inflate to
XX” message will continue to be displayed.
Upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
Warning Light will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in
the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as
long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX"
message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 256.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 256.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 371 for customer
service contact information.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
(Continued)
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from
your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up
or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third
row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the
seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate can then be stored out of the
way in the headliner for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind
the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
headliner slightly behind the second or
third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
left head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 266.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate
above the park stitch to enable occupants to
latch the seat belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip
on the lower trim behind the third row. This clip
is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of
the power folding third row seat.
Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip
while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave
the webbing behind the clip when using the belt
to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind
the third row stow clip when using the seat
belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will
not be positioned properly on the occupant
and they could be more seriously injured in
an accident as a result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert
you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 106.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen-
tal Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(OCS) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight
on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds
an object while seated (e.g., backpack,
box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
(Continued)
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
mounted in the instrument panel below the
glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags provide enhanced protection during a
frontal impact by working together with the seat
belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
(Continued)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
(Continued)
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage
to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Quad Seating LATCH Positions
(Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages
Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages
Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (Two Anchorages
Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages
in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head
restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they
interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row
Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row
center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd
row outboard head restraints are not removable Ú page 46.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages
(Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Bench Seating
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind all second row seating
positions. The third row has a tether
anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard
seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 7
Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in
the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are
used for the right outboard position behind the
front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are
used for the center seating position (2). The left
outboard position (3) does not have lower
anchorages. Do not
install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH
position in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 266 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the
center seating position (2). Do not install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please see Ú page 265 for typical installa-
tion instructions.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 271 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 238 for additional information on ALR.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n
Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd
row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable Ú page 46.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 271 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped
with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for
easier access to occupants. If the park stitch
interferes with the tight installation of a child
restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching
to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install
the car seat following the steps above. When
the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide
the latch plate above the park stitch to enable
occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off
features of the child restraint, do not use the
lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to
the locking mode, as described in the steps
above or move the car seat to a different
seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row
8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 3rd Row
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 260 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage
Shown)
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the
60% seat in the third row may be used by either
the left outboard or the center seating position.
Only tether one child restraint to the tether
anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the
60% third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the
anchor and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the
center head restraint and route the tether
strap around the inboard (left) side of the
head restraint support posts, as shown in
the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
(Continued)
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage
is intended for one child restraint at a time.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected.
It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the
light comes on intermittently or remains on
while driving, have an authorized dealer service
the vehicle immediately Ú page 229.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 276
277
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
in the lower center area of the instrument
panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
SOS and ASSIST button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 375.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle is being driven and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
(Continued)
(Continued)
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occu-
pants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator
terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or
hardware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if
equipped) are stowed behind an access panel
on the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing
nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire
and gently remove it from the storage area.
Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
Jacking Equipment Jacking Equipment Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise to collapse from storage
area that is located behind the tire.
Jack Location
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
Detailed information about the inflatable spare
tire, its use, and operation can be found on
Ú page 354.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body. These
locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking loca-
tions are critical. See below images for proper
jacking locations.
Jack Locations Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 285
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the
surface and enough clearance is obtained
to install the compact spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel
cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle,
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire
is mounted incorrectly.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start
inflating the inflatable spare after the tire
has been mounted to the vehicle. Secure
the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts
with the wrench. After inflation, once the
vehicle is lowered you will have a second
opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts
Ú page 363.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure
60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air
Compressor Ú page 289 or Tire Service Kit
if equipped Ú page 290.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare
has reached its pressure and the
compressor-hose has been removed from
the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice Ú page 363. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray
cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do
not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable
spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire
repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage
compartment and place the access panel
back. The stud of the storage area must be
threaded through the lower part of the jack.
Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to
secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the
cargo area.
Storing The Jack
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 287
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug
nuts on the mounting studs which are on
each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the
cover by hand, snapping the cover over the
two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or
excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the
wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no
play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened
once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an
improperly seated wheel under vehicle load
can damage the threads, cause vibration,
and undermine safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. Details for proper wheel lug
nut torque Ú page 363. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 288
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable
Air Compressor. Use the Portable Air
Compressor located in the side compartment of
the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to
60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable
Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from
the storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described
in the Jacking Instructions within
this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire
as described in the Jack
Instructions section in this
manual. Make sure that the valve
stem is located near the ground, and then
screw the air hose of the Portable Air
Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and
connect it the vehicles 12 Volt
power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air
Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) recommended as per
the label on the wheel or if the
vehicle equipped with the
inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on
the Tire and Loading information label
located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation
button to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower
the vehicle with the jack as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air
Compressor and place it on the
center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the
foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store
the foam tray in the cargo area.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 289
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage
location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service
Kit or Portable Air Compressor Ú page 289
and push the deflation button to do this
step. See the Portable Air Compressor in
this section for additional information. The
inflatable spare tire will return to its original
shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its
original stowage location and position
facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the
strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and
is stored in the storage bin located behind the
rear cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air
Compressor by the hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor
only in the provided place.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away
from open flames or heat source.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this
section for further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 292
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and
cycle the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated
tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle’s
12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob
is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow
from the Sealant Bottle through
the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the
valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that
the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 293
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 -
70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air
into the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue
to operate the pump and inflate
the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure
found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door
opening. Check the tire pressure by looking
at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn
the Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label
from the Tire Service Kit and
place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire
Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 294
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem
in this position before proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow the steps
below
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated
tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and
insert the plug into the vehicle's
12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto
the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn
on Tire Service Kit and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation
pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 295
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 296
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow
the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
Battery Post Locations
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
place the ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 297
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) near the windshield cowl.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 298
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is
necessary, while using an approved gas can,
insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck
opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 299
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highway — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 300
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual
Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the
steering column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the
tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The transmission should now be
in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion, the tether will remain outside of the trim
panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
stalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before
activating the Manual Park Release. If
possible, you should apply the parking brake.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or
properly connected to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
re-install the access cover. If the access cover
cannot be re-installed, repeat steps
1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less.
Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 212.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
(if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid
inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 303
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled
vehicle, located on the underbody of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attach-
ment points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by
a trained professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the
vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 304
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is
opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not
in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are
towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/
RUN mode, you must manually disable the Elec-
tric Park Brake each time the driver's door is
opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, detailed instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle Ú page 301.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 253.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 255.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 305
306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer Ú page 97.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required
maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
(Continued)
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
X X
Replace PCV valve X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual washer
fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 297.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 307.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has
separated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information located
online, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove
compartment.
Glove Compartment
2. Open the glove compartment door partially,
leaving extra slack on the glove
compartment tension tether. Detach the
glove compartment tension tether by sliding
the black tension tether clip down, and
popping it out of the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on either side of the glove compartment
door. To release them, push inward on each
travel stop, and pull the glove compartment
door down until the travel stops pass clear
of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
5. Pry up the lid of each individual
compartment snap, and detach it from the
rest of the snap. There is a small space on
the side of each snap to use for separating
the lid from the snap. Once detached,
remove the rest of the snap completely from
the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the
compartment cover to gain access to the
fresh air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each
of the retaining tabs from their hooking
points, and then pulling the filter cover out
to expose the cabin air filter. Remove the air
filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter
cover, making sure the retaining tabs are
fully secured into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment
cover, and reinsert the snaps into their
slots. Push the snap lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the
near closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the
glove compartment tension tether clip down
and slide it back into the slot on the side of
the glove compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to
separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO,
Ú page 273 for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items come into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to the manufacturer
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage.
If any coolant is needed to be added to the
system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 307.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 368.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant.
If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using OAT engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding engine
coolant:
We recommend using Mopar®
Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant
(antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 307.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake
fluid Ú page 370.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended
brake fluid Ú page 370. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 370. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality
and/or torque converter shudder
Ú page 370.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into a controller located
in the engine compartment.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses,
micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the
inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks
located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the
usage of screw drivers or any other tool to
remove the cover, since they may apply
excessive force and result in a broken/
damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its
two locks.
Power Distribution Center
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only)
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear –
2nd Row Folding Seats
Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear –
2nd Row Folding Seat
Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25A – 10 Amp Red
Handsfree LT & RT RR Door
Release Mod *
F25B – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror *
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2 *
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW *
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module *
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55A – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless
Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic
Steering Lock-BUX ONLY) *
F55B – 15 Amp Blue
DVD / Video Routing Module
(VRM) *
F56A – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control
Module / Occupant Classification
Module (OCM)/Electronic Steering
Lock (ESL)
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power
Transfer Unit *
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/
SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module
(HALF) / Parktronics System (PTS)/
Drivers Assist System Module
(DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup *
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/
Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB
Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vacuum Cleaner SW/3rd Row
Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go
SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW
Backlight
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)/ E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red
ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/
EPB
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD *
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated
Steering Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module *
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
** 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp
Circuit Breaker.
F100A – 10 Amp Red AHLM *
F100B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp ** Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes
+ RR PWR Window Lockout
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Halogen Head Lamp
Reflector Low Beam — H11LL
Reflector High Beam — 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then
remove the front turn signal lamp assembly
from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly into the housing, and rotate the
front turn signal lamp socket clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front And Rear Side Marker Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner
wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for
access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp
socket and rotate a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to remove it from the lamp
assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker
lamp socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in
lamp assembly and rotate a quarter turn
clockwise to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install the three fasteners.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in this manual
Ú page 144.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, Ú page 144.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode Ú page 225.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/
h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced Ú page 352.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 351. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 341.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control
and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can result
in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
note:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire Ú page 290.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 151.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
(Continued)
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
L
LX
LXI
Front 235/65R17 9 mm Cable/Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed Ú page 306.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically
recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and the manufac-
turer recommends Mopar® total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 362
363
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on
the left front corner of the instrument panel and
is visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 363
364 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 364
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 365
The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline is
not required, as it will not provide any benefit
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 365
366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 366
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 367
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty
Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 367
368 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 368
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 369
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 369
370 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should
be used.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 370
371
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service.
FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US
LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 371
372 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA C ANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 372
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 373
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 373
374 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov .
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP .
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or
Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 374
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 375
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 375
376
INDEX
Android Auto™ .........................................203
Apple CarPlay® ........................................206
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
............................................................193
WARRANTY INFORMATION .......................373
A
About Your Brakes .........................................363
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ..............................................133
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............324
Additives, Fuel ...............................................366
Adjust
Down
...........................................................44
Forward ....................................................... 44
Rearward..................................................... 44
Up................................................................ 44
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................201
Air Bag ...........................................................242
Air Bag Operation ......................................243
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 241 , 244
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................249
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 253, 305
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................305
Front Air Bag .............................................244
If Deployment Occurs ................................252
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................249
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 254
Maintenance ............................................ 254
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 242
Side Air Bags ............................................ 249
Transporting Pets ..................................... 273
Air Bag Light................................106 , 241, 274
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 314
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 315
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 315
Air Conditioner System ................................. 315
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................76 , 316
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................76
Air Filter ........................................................ 314
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 349
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................21
Disarm The System .....................................21
Security Alarm .......................................... 109
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
........................................................... 8
Android Auto ........................................ 203 , 205
Android Auto™ ......................................... 203
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 323 , 367
Disposal ................................................... 325
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 210
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 109
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 203 , 207
Apple CarPlay® ....................................... 206
Ashtray .............................................................85
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 215
Audio Jack ........................................................82
Audio Settings ............................................... 186
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 157
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................87
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................51
Automatic Headlights .......................................58
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............75
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 125
Automatic Transmission ................................ 126
Adding Fluid .....................................327 , 370
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 327
Fluid Change ............................................. 327
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 327
Fluid Type ........................................ 327 , 370
Special Additives ...................................... 327
AutoPark ....................................................... 117
AUX Cord ..........................................................82
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........83
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 370
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 376
377
B
Back-Up Camera
............................................142
Battery ................................................. 107 , 312
Charging System Light ...............................107
Jump Starting ............................................297
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 13
Battery Saver Feature ......................................59
Belts, Seat .....................................................274
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................217
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
.....196
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................317
B-Pillar Location .............................................345
Brake Assist System ......................................211
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................211
Brake Fluid ....................................................370
Brake System ...................................... 326 , 363
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................363
Fluid Check ..................................... 326 , 370
Master Cylinder .........................................326
Parking ......................................................122
Warning Light ............................................106
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................126
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................ 60
Bulb Replacement ............................... 337 , 339
Bulbs, Light ................................. 275 , 337, 339
C
Camera ......................................................... 142
Camera, Rear ................................................ 142
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 367
Caps, Filler
Fuel
.......................................................... 143
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 310
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 324
Car Washes................................................... 360
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 276
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ...........................................91
Cargo Area Cover .............................................91
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier
...........................................91
Cargo Load Floor ..............................................91
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................91
CD................................................................. 188
Cellular Phone .............................................. 209
Certification Label ......................................... 144
Chains, Tire ................................................... 356
Change Oil Indicator ........................................98
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 281
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 341
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)
......................... 115
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 273
Checks, Safety .............................................. 273
Child Restraint .............................................. 256
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 259
Center Seat LATCH ................................... 265
Child Seat Installation ...................... 267 , 269
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 266
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 257
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children
................................................ 260
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 258
Seating Positions ...................................... 260
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............. 271
Cigar Lighter .....................................................85
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 365
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 355
Climate Control ................................................63
Automatic ....................................................63
Manual ........................................................69
Rear ......................................................68 , 74
Coat Hook ........................................................81
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 120
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 353
Computer, Trip/Travel ................................... 105
Contract, Service ........................................... 372
Controls ........................................................ 178
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 324
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 377
378
Cooling System
..............................................322
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................324
Coolant Level ............................................325
Cooling Capacity ........................................367
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................325
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................323
Inspection ....................................... 323 , 325
Points To Remember .................................325
Pressure Cap .............................................324
Radiator Cap .............................................324
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ........................ 323 , 367, 368
Corrosion Protection ......................................360
Cruise Control ................................................133
Cruise Light ......................................... 113 , 114
Customer Assistance .....................................371
Cybersecurity .................................................157
D
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights
.................. 61
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 57
Dealer Service ...............................................312
Defroster, Windshield ....................................274
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 20
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 61
Deleting A Phone ...........................................196
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................114
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
.....................................................57
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 311
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 303
Disc Drive ..................................................... 188
Disconnecting ............................................... 196
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 325
Disturb .......................................................... 199
Door Ajar .............................................. 107 , 108
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 107 , 108
Drag & Drop .................................................. 176
Driver Memory Presets ................................. 185
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................30
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 155
E
Electric Brake Control System ....................... 211
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 210
Traction Control System ........................... 216
Electric Parking Brake ................................... 122
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................52
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 212
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 108
Emergency Braking ....................................... 224
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 299
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 277
Jacking............................................. 281 , 284
Jump Starting ........................................... 297
Overheating .............................................. 300
Towing ...................................................... 303
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 115
Engine ........................................................... 310
Air Cleaner ................................................ 314
Block Heater ............................................. 121
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 121
Checking Oil Level .................................... 311
Compartment ........................................... 310
Compartment Identification ...................... 310
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 368
Cooling...................................................... 322
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 276
Fails To Start ............................................. 120
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 120
Fuel Requirements ................................... 364
Oil ...........................................313 , 367, 368
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 310
Oil Filter .................................................... 313
Oil Selection.....................................313 , 367
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 313
Overheating .............................................. 300
Starting ..................................................... 116
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 378
379
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 253 , 305
Ethanol ..........................................................365
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................................276
Exhaust System ................................... 276 , 321
Exterior Lighting ......................................57 , 339
Exterior Lights ...................... 57 , 275, 337, 339
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................314
Air Conditioning ..................................76 , 316
Engine Oil ........................................ 313 , 368
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................313
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................................277
Turn Signals .................... 57, 113, 275, 339
Flash-To-Pass ........................................... 57 , 58
Flat Tire Changing ....................... 281 , 340, 353
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 290 , 340, 353
Flooded Engine Starting ................................120
Fluid Capacities .............................................367
Fluid Leaks ....................................................275
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................326
Engine Oil ..................................................311
Fluid, Brake ...................................................370
Fog Lights ................................................. 57 , 59
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating .................... 40
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 30
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 221
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 302
Front Position Light ....................................... 339
Fuel............................................................... 364
Additives ................................................... 366
Clean Air ................................................... 365
Ethanol ..................................................... 365
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 143
Gasoline ................................................... 364
Materials Added ....................................... 366
Methanol .................................................. 365
Octane Rating .................................. 364 , 368
Requirements ........................................... 364
Specifications ........................................... 368
Tank Capacity ........................................... 367
Fuses ............................................................ 328
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................53
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 143
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 364
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 365
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 365
Gear Ranges ................................................. 127
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 362
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 146
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 145
GVWR............................................................ 144
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water
....................... 155
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 277
Head Restraints ...............................................46
Headlights ........................................................57
Cleaning.................................................... 360
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........57
Lights On Reminder ..............................57 , 59
Passing .................................................57 , 58
Switch ..........................................................57
Time Delay ...................................................57
Heated Mirrors .................................................51
Heated Seats ...................................................46
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 121
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 215
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 147
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................53
Hood Prop ........................................................88
Hood Release ...................................................88
Hook, Coat .......................................................81
I
Ignition .............................................................16
Switch ..........................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 51 , 277
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 379
380
Instrument Cluster
........................................... 96
Descriptions ..............................................113
Display ........................................................ 97
Display Controls .......................................... 97
KeySense Message ..................................... 99
Menu Items ...............................................100
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................362
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 60
Interior Appearance Care ...............................361
Interior Lights .................................................. 60
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 61
Introduction ....................................................... 7
J
Jack Location
.................................................282
Jack Operation ...............................................281
Jump Starting ................................................297
K
Key Fob
...........................................................12
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 14
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 13
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 14
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................24
Passive Entry ...............................................24
Keys.................................................................12
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................57
Lane Change Assist ..................................57 , 59
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 231
Latches ......................................................... 275
Hood............................................................88
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 364
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 275
Life Of Tires ................................................... 351
Liftgate ............................................................89
Power ..........................................................90
Light Bulbs ........................................... 275 , 339
Lighter
Cigar
............................................................85
Lights ............................................................ 275
Air Bag .................................... 106 , 241, 274
Battery Saver ...............................................59
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 214
Brake Warning .......................................... 106
Bulb Replacement ........................... 337 , 339
Cruise .............................................. 113 , 114
Daytime Running .........................................57
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................57
Engine Temperature Warning ................... 108
Exterior ............................................ 275 , 339
Fog ..............................................................59
Headlights ............................................57 , 58
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................57
Instrument Cluster .......................................57
Intensity Control ..........................................60
Interior .........................................................60
Lights On Reminder ..............................57 , 59
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 110
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............61
Park .......................................................... 113
Passing .................................................57 , 58
Reading .......................................................60
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 109
Security Alarm .......................................... 109
Service...................................................... 337
Side Marker .............................................. 339
Traction Control ........................................ 214
Turn Signals .....................57 , 113, 275, 339
Warning Instrument
Cluster Descriptions .................... 108 , 113
Load Floor, Cargo .............................................91
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 104
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 104
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 104
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 104
Loading Vehicle ...................................... 91 , 144
Tires.......................................................... 345
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 225
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 317
Lug Nuts........................................................ 363
Luggage Carrier ................................................91
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 380
381
M
Maintenance Free Battery
.............................312
Maintenance Schedule ..................................306
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
.................................... 110 , 115
Manual
Park Release .............................................301
Service ......................................................374
Map/Reading Lights ........................................ 60
Marker Lights, Side .......................................339
Media Hub ....................................................... 82
Media Mode ..................................................188
Memory Seat ................................................... 52
Methanol .......................................................365
Mini-Trip Computer ........................................105
Mirrors ............................................................. 51
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 51
Electric Remote ........................................... 52
Exterior Folding ........................................... 53
Heated ........................................................ 51
Outside................................................. 51 , 52
Rearview ............................................51 , 277
Vanity .......................................................... 52
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.......................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................225
Mopar Parts ...................................................373
MP3 Control .................................................... 82
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 57
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 121
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 229
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 364 , 368
Oil Change Indicator ........................................98
Reset ...........................................................98
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 313
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 313
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 109
Oil, Engine............................................ 313 , 368
Capacity.................................................... 367
Checking................................................... 311
Dipstick .................................................... 311
Disposal ................................................... 313
Filter ................................................ 313 , 368
Filter Disposal ........................................... 313
Identification Logo .................................... 313
Materials Added To .................................. 313
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 109
Recommendation ............................ 313 , 367
Synthetic .................................................. 313
Viscosity ................................................... 367
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 114
Operating Precautions .................................. 114
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................ 374
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................51 , 52
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 300
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 360
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone .......................................... 193
Parking Brake ............................................... 122
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 135
Passive Entry....................................................24
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 176
Pets............................................................... 273
Phone Mode .................................................. 191
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 345
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 363
Mirrors .........................................................52
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................83
Seats ...........................................................44
Steering .................................................... 131
Power Seats
Down ...........................................................44
Forward .......................................................44
Rearward .....................................................44
Up ................................................................44
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .....................................27 , 90
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 237
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 282
Presets .......................................................... 185
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 238
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 381
382
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................350
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............324
Radio
Presets
......................................................185
Radio Controls ...............................................178
Radio Mode ...................................................178
Radio Operation .................................. 178 , 209
Radio Remote Controls ..................................177
Rear Air Conditioning ................................ 68 , 74
Rear Cross Path .............................................220
Rear ParkSense System ................................135
Rear Seat Removal .......................................... 33
Rear View ........................................................ 51
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 31
Recreational Towing ......................................154
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................365
Refrigerant ....................................................315
Release, Hood ................................................. 88
Reminder, Lights On ........................................ 57
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................230
Remote Control
Starting System
........................................... 18
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
............................................. 21
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 14
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........177
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................19
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ..................................................20
Uconnect Settings .......................................20
Remote Starting System ..................................18
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 337
Replacement Tires ........................................ 352
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 373
Restraints, Child ........................................... 256
Restraints, Head ..............................................46
Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................91
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 358
S
Safety ........................................................... 176
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 274
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 275
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 373
Safety Features ............................................. 176
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 340
Safety Tips .................................................... 273
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 276
Satellite Radio .............................................. 179
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 185
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 306
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 109
Seat Belts ............................................ 230 , 274
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 234
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 234
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 234
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 238
Child Restraints ........................................ 256
Energy Management Feature ................... 238
Extender ................................................... 237
Front Seat ...............................230 , 231, 232
Inspection ................................................. 274
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 232
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 233
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 231
Operating Instructions .............................. 232
Pregnant Women ...................................... 237
Pretensioners ........................................... 238
Rear Seat.................................................. 231
Reminder .................................................. 230
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 237
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 238
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 233
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 361
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 382
383
Seats
................................................. 30 , 44, 46
Adjustment ...................... 30, 31, 32, 33, 44
Bench .......................................................... 33
Heated ........................................................ 46
Power .......................................................... 44
Rear Folding ................................................ 30
Reclining ..................................................... 31
Seatback Release ......................... 30 , 32, 33
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ............................ 40
Tilting ................................................... 30 , 32
Security Alarm ...............................................109
Arm The System .......................................... 21
Disarm The System ..................................... 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................368
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 16
Service Assistance .........................................371
Service Contract ............................................372
Service Manuals ............................................374
Settings, Audio ..............................................186
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
............................126
Shoulder Belts ...............................................231
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 51
Signals, Turn ........................ 57 , 113, 275, 339
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................179
Favorites ...................................................183
Replay .......................................................181
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 183
Favorites................................................... 183
Replay ...................................................... 181
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 356
Snow Tires .................................................... 353
Spare Tire Changing ..................................... 281
Spare Tire Stowage ....................................... 290
Spare Tires ........................282 , 353, 354, 355
Specifications
Oil
............................................................. 368
Speed Control
Cancel
...................................................... 135
Resume .................................................... 135
Starting ...................................................18 , 116
Button .........................................................16
Cold Weather ............................................ 120
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 120
Remote........................................................18
Starting And Operating .................................. 116
Starting Procedures ...................................... 116
Steering ........................................................ 131
Tilt Column ..................................................29
Wheel, Heated .............................................29
Wheel, Tilt....................................................29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 177
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 177
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 185
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats .......................40
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 302
Sunglasses Storage .........................................78
Supplemental Restraint System –
Air Bag
.......................................................... 242
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 216
Symbol Glossary .................................................9
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 313
System, Remote Starting .................................18
T
Telescoping Steering Column
...........................29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............75
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................91
Tilt Steering Column .........................................29
Time Delay
Headlight
.....................................................57
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 345
Tire Markings ................................................ 340
Tire Safety Information .................................. 340
Tire Service Kit .............................................. 290
Tire Stowage ................................................. 290
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 383
384
Tires
...................................275 , 348, 353, 358
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................351
Air Pressure ...............................................348
Chains .......................................................356
Changing ...................................................281
Compact Spare .........................................353
General Information ........................ 348 , 353
High Speed ................................................349
Inflation Pressure ......................................349
Jacking ............................................ 281 , 284
Life Of Tires ...............................................351
Load Capacity ............................................345
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ............................... 100 , 111, 225
Quality Grading ..........................................358
Radial ........................................................350
Replacement .............................................352
Rotation ....................................................358
Safety .............................................. 340 , 348
Sizes..........................................................341
Snow Tires .................................................353
Spare Tires ....................282 , 353, 354, 355
Spinning ....................................................350
Trailer Towing ............................................151
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................351
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................363
To Open Hood .................................................. 88
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................150
Towing .......................................................... 145
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 303
Guide........................................................ 148
Recreational ............................................. 154
Weight ...................................................... 148
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 154
Traction......................................................... 155
Traction Control ............................................ 216
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 216
Trailer Towing ............................................... 145
Hitches ..................................................... 147
Minimum Requirements ........................... 150
Tips........................................................... 153
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 150
Wiring ....................................................... 152
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 148
Trailer Weight ................................................ 148
Transaxle
Automatic ................................................. 125
Operation ................................................. 125
Transmission ................................................ 126
Automatic ........................................ 126 , 327
Maintenance ............................................ 327
Transporting Pets .......................................... 273
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 351
Turn Signals .................................. 57 , 113, 339
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 198
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 201
Uconnect Settings .......................................20
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display
.......................................................... 158
Uconnect Phone ................................... 193 , 195
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 199
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 199
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 203
Call Continuation ...................................... 201
Call Controls ............................................. 198
Call Termination ....................................... 200
Cancel Command ..................................... 193
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 196
Help Command ......................................... 193
Join Calls .................................................. 200
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 196
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 384
385
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
.................................200
Managing Your Favorites ...........................197
Natural Speech .........................................193
Operation ..................................................192
Overview....................................................191
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
........................................193
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
...................................................195
Phonebook Download ...............................197
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............200
Power-Up ...................................................203
Recent Calls ..............................................199
Redial ........................................................200
To Remove A Favorite ...............................198
Toggling Between Calls .............................200
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................199
Transfer Call To And From Mobile
Phone
...................................................201
Voice Command ........................................201
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
...... 20, 24
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 24
Uconnect System .......................................... 174
Umbrella Holder ...............................................79
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 358
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 364
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 233
USB..................................................................82
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................52
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 363
Vehicle Loading ................................... 144 , 345
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 312
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8
Voice Command ............................ 50 , 205, 207
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................50
W
Warning Lights
Blue
.......................................................... 114
Green ....................................................... 113
Red........................................................... 106
White ........................................................ 114
Yellow ....................................................... 109
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................................................. 110
Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 106
Warranty Information .................................... 373
WARRANTY INFORMATION ...................... 373
Washers, Windshield .................................... 311
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 360
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 155
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 355
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 355
Wind Buffeting .................................................87
Window Fogging ...............................................76
Windows ..........................................................86
Power...........................................................86
Windshield Defroster .................................... 274
Windshield Washers .............................. 61 , 311
Fluid.......................................................... 311
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 318
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 318
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................61
Wrecker Towing ............................................. 303
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 385
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 (U.S.)
or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents
can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
VOYAGER
2021 Voyager
OWNER’S MANUAL
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque
déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition
_RUV_OM_EN_US
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
